JP6731432B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a detection means such as a push button capable of detecting a motion of the player, and a continuous hit production for advancing an effect in response to detection of a continuous hit operation which is a continuous motion of the player. There was something that would advance the production of such as. In such a gaming machine, when a player's motion different from a continuous motion such as a long-press operation of a push button is detected, a continuous hit operation is considered to be executed at a predetermined interval Depending on the situation, there is one that advances effects such as continuous hit effects (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-180364, A (paragraph 0138 grade).

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, in a specific state, the player's own continuous motion and the player's own continuous motion are performed by the self-powered continuous motion, even though the player operates at a higher speed than the deemed continuous motion. The deemed continuous motion did not change the progress of the production depending on the motion detection. As a result, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player cannot feel the significance of continuous operation by himself.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to feel the significance of continuous operation by himself/herself.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player,
A specific display means for displaying a specific display,
Based on the fact that the detection means detects a predetermined movement of the player different from the continuous movement of the player during the detection effective period of the detection means, it is judged that the continuous movement is executed at predetermined intervals. Motion determining means for
Based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means during the detection effective period, it is possible to execute a specific production capable of changing the production mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous movement. And a specific effect execution means,
Further, the specific effect executing means can change the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages in accordance with the continuous operation at the predetermined interval, based on the determination that the operation determining means determines the continuous operation. It is possible to execute a specific production,
The specific effect executing means,
When performing the specific effect based on the determination of the continuous action, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to a maximum of a predetermined specific stage, and is shorter than the predetermined interval of the determination of the continuous action. When performing the specific effect based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means at intervals, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to a maximum specific step higher than the predetermined step,
It is possible to change the presentation mode of the specific display to a special stage different from the specific stage based on the establishment of a special condition,
When it is predetermined to execute an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage as the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific display is based on the determination of the continuous motion. After changing to a predetermined stage, the detection means detects a continuous movement of the player, and the detection means does not detect a continuous movement of the player. Reachable,
When the effect of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage within the detection effective period, the effect of the specific display can be expanded to a first effect mode, and the effect of the specific display during the effective detection period. When the particular stage is reached, the performance mode can be developed into the second performance mode,
When a specific condition is satisfied, in the specific effect, an effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage is executed,
When the specific condition is satisfied, before execution of the effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage, when the effect mode of the specific display does not reach the specific step , Based on the detection of a specific motion different from the player's continuous motion, the effect mode of the specific display is changed with a change degree higher than the change degree of the effect mode of the specific display according to the player's continuous motion The effect to be performed can be executed .
Note that the gaming machine may have the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like),
Detection means (push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
Specific display means (image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, S261FS013 of FIG. 22-6, S172 of FIG. 7, etc.) for displaying a specific display (meter image 261F001, etc.),
It is considered that the continuous operation is executed at a predetermined interval based on the detection of the predetermined operation of the player different from the continuous operation of the player (such as continuous hitting by the player) during the detection effective period of the detection means. An operation determination unit (e.g., CPU 120 for effect control, S261FS024 of FIG. 22-7, etc.) that determines continuous operation (e.g., automatic continuous hitting),
Based on the detection of the player's continuous motion (self-powered continuous hit, etc.) by the detection means during the detection effective period, the presentation mode of the specific display is changed in a plurality of stages according to the continuous motion (FIG. 22-). 2(A) or the like) and a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120, S261FS026, etc. of FIG. 22-7) capable of executing a specific effect (self-powered continuous meter effect, etc.),
The specific effect executing means further sets the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages in response to the continuous operation (automatic continuous hitting, etc.) at the predetermined interval, based on the continuous operation considered determination by the operation determining means. It is possible to execute a specific effect that can be changed (FIG. 22-2(B), etc.) (automatic continuous hit meter effect, etc.) (S261FS025, etc. in FIG. 22-7),
The specific effect execution means detects the player by the detection means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation considered judgment, as compared with when the specific effect is executed based on the determination of the continuous motion considered. When the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous motion, the specific stage in which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is higher (see FIGS. 22-2(A) and (B)). As described above, the maximum change level of the meter effect is higher when the player repeatedly hits himself than when the player continuously hits it automatically).
The specific effect executing means, when executing the specific effect on the basis of the continuous movement of the player being detected by the detecting means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation regarding determination, the continuous operation is performed. Compared with the case where the specific effect is executed based on the determination that the determination is made, the specific step in which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is increased (see FIGS. 22-2(A) and (B)). As described above, the maximum change level of the meter effect is higher when the player repeatedly hits himself than when the player continuously hits it automatically).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the significance of performing continuous motions by themselves.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The specific performance can be developed into a plurality of types of predetermined performance modes (first development performance, second development performance, special development performance, etc.) (FIG. 22-1),
Within the detection effective period, a specific display is performed depending on whether the performance mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage (level L5) or when the performance mode of the specific display reaches the specific stage (level L10). 22. Different types of the predetermined production mode of the production mode of the production mode are different (as shown in FIGS. 22-1 (B) and (C), the first development production can be moved when the level L5 is reached, and the second development production can be transferred when the level L10 is reached. Possible etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the player's own continuous operation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means can cause the effect mode of the specific display to reach a special step (level MAX) higher than the specific step based on the establishment of a special condition (a big hit decision or the like) (FIG. 22- 1(D), it is possible to shift to the special development effect when the level MAX is reached (FIGS. 22-4(A), (B), FIG. 22-5(B), (D), etc.),
The special stage is a production mode that is unreachable when the specific production is executed based on the continuous movement of the player being detected by the detection means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous movement deemed determination. 22-5 (A) and (C) in FIG. 22-5 (when the production pattern that reaches the level MAX is not determined, even if the player continuously hits at high speed, the level MAX cannot be reached).

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is not satisfied, even if the player continuously operates at too high speed by himself, the special stage is reached so that the special stage cannot be reached. It is possible to determine the stages of possible performance modes.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific effect executing means, when executing the specific effect based on the continuous operation at the predetermined interval due to the determination of the continuous operation based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the specific stage or more It is possible to reach the stage (as shown in FIGS. 22-5 (B) and (D), if the effect pattern to reach the level MAX is determined, the level MAX can be reached even if automatic continuous hits are made).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player who performs the continuous motion based on the determination of the continuous motion from being reduced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific effect executing means,
When the specific condition is satisfied (such as when there is insufficient meter display in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7), in the specific effect, an effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage is executed. (For example, perform a meter display adjustment effect in S261FS029 of FIG. 22-7),
When the specific condition is satisfied, before execution of the effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage, when the effect mode of the specific display does not reach the specific step, Based on the detection of a specific motion (tilting motion of the stick controller 31A, etc.) different from the continuous motion of the player, the degree of change of the specific display effect mode according to the continuous motion of the player (continuous hitting motion, etc.) It is possible to execute an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific display with a high degree of change (FIGS. 22-8 (B), (C), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, in the specific effect, when the effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific step is executed, the stage may change too much. Even if there is, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a feeling of strangeness in the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display by the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display based on the detection of the specific operation different from the continuous operation of the player. it can.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Advantageous state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player (game control microcomputer 100 or the like),
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled (CPU 120 for effect control, etc.);
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect (CPU 120 for effect control, etc.),
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of effect when the suggestive effect is executed.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (11) above,
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
And a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17E, FIG. 18I),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and 18(K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (12),
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size to be displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (e.g., reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed at the time of reaching the reach title shown in (d) of FIG. 19)). The display device 5 and the CPU 120) for effect control are further provided,
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19(a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display monitor and a display content on the display monitor in Modification 4; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a time chart showing a display time of items displayed on the display monitor and a change in display content of the display monitor in Modification 4; It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the suggestion production decision table during the game. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is a display screen figure of image display device 5 showing an example of meter production. 6 is a timing chart showing detection determination and meter display change in each of self-powered continuous hits and automatic continuous hits. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is a figure which shows a special development production selection table in a table format. It is a diagram showing a development effect pattern selection table in a table format. It is a flowchart showing a continuous hit effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows continuous hit production processing. FIG. 11 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example in which the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the player performing a specific operation different from repeated hits. It is a display screen figure of image display device 5 showing an example of a plurality of specific image display effects. Performance control for each period during which the effect is executed when the push button operation is not detected within the operation valid period between the first and second effect periods during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special symbol FIG. 6 is a display screen diagram of the image display device showing FIG. It is the figure which shows the production pattern selection table which is used in the latter part of production control classified by period in tabular form. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd consecutive hit production processing.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed in the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5, for example.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of general figure reservations is displayed by turning on the general figure reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted as described above is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether the reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the production control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern by the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect effect processing during the variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit mid-game production process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit medium production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8(A), in the present embodiment, the variable patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are non-reach-miss patterns in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more stages is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, notifies the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach notifies the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with higher reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. The title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. .. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative pattern showing the numeral 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the effect branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach production is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of super reach (also referred to as super reach production) is finished, as shown in FIG. 9D, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The title 31AK002 (here, “SP reach A” here) of the super reach A is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (“super reach A” here) is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 as the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9(F), the title 31AK005 (here "SP reach B" is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of super reach B. It After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9G. The succeeding part of the reach effect of super reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9(C)→(D)→(E)...) and Super Reach B(FIG. 9(C)→(F)→(G)...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to a completely common presentation mode until the title is announced, and at least one of them can be determined by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, a title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the degree of reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the notification of the sound of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, title 31AK0
07 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9(I) shows the same effect contents as FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach productions such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the super-reach reach effect with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the reach effect. In the reach effect of super-reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for the title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be one (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying an expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9(H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or may correspond to the expectation degree. The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9(H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half the number (half) of black stars may be displayed, and the number of expected levels may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the below-described determination effect is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but during the reach production. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

In addition, when displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, during the reach effect of super reach, it is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. After that, when developing to the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of development into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for notifying the title by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that there is a failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 9(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displays the black stars indicating the expectations from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and step by step. You may make it perform an expectation suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A performance that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more steps. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIG. 12G to FIG. 12L are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes and the special mode is set. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. A production that fits in one of the white rhombuses is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted such as shining, as shown in FIG. In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., by varying the notification mode of the title, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is increased. improves.

Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect effect) depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of the present embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect in which the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, thereby The Reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, the expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Advance notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed in accordance with the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14,
After the reach title is notified by voice, the display mode (display color) of the title may change. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a variation pattern of super-reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of changing the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display colors that change, as shown in FIG. 14, the display colors may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16(B) in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue and the effect is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. The jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, if the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, and the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice mode is obtained. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the speech advance notice, the advance notice effect may be executed to give an advance notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the change timing.

After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results of 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31
(S005), the notice production determination process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice can be executed in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reach with low reliability). Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Although the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 16, the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice production with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of the effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed after the title notification, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which a background image and an effect mode on the image display device 5 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and execute a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, at the timing of deriving the display result, the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17(A), after the reach mode is set on the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C) to (F) and FIGS. 18(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17(E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 18(H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18(I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 18(K). , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18(M), a fixed decorative design that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, improving the effect of the effect and increasing the player's expectation. Can be maintained.

In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted. However, the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 19(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the display returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately inform that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part of this embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part of the present embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 105SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 105SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 105SG003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 105SG003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 105SG003a. When the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking the door key.
The SG003 and the glass door frame 105SG003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 105SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 105SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 105SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052, is housed in the substrate case 105SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting change switch 105SG052 are included. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 105SG201.

Since the board case 105SG201 having the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, the lock switch 105SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The lock switch 105SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using the setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, on the substrate case 105SG201, a display monitor 105SG029 and a display changeover switch 105SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 105SG029 are arranged. The display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 105SG201. That is, the display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 in the board case 105SG201 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the rear surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the present embodiment cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a includes a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. A security cover 105SG500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 105SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 105SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 105SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 105SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 105SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 105SG201. The security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 105SG001a via the front end of the short piece 105SG500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 105SG500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 105SG201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. By doing so, the right side portion of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 become inoperable by the long piece 105SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 to move from the long piece 105SG500Ab. By separating, the covering state by the long piece 105SG500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. While the state is maintained, in the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 105SG500A described above is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 105SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 unless a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003 with the door key.

However, even when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like, which is installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the lock switch 105SG051. There is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the set value by operating the setting switch 105SG052 or the setting switch 105G is performed. Therefore, the security switch 105SG500A switches between the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 105SG052 is restricted, it is possible to preferably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 is covered by the security cover 105SG500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 105SG500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 105SG201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the variation pattern. Numerical value data indicating the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

In the present embodiment, each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value within the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the random number values MR1 to MR1. The range of MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-5 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a “big hit”. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "miss". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 20-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation patterns super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In the present embodiment, these variation patterns are determined after first determining the variation pattern type, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super-reach type, etc. Although the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and fluctuations are made from these random value for fluctuation pattern type determination. The pattern type may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-5, the form in which the change content (effect content) is predetermined for each change pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same according to the set value that is set. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern that is the normal reach loss is set, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed 3 times and the variation pattern may be set as super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 and 20-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-6(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-6(B), and FIG. -6 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 20-6 (A) jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), Figure 20-6 (B) jackpot type determination Other than the table (for the second special symbol), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table (not shown), a universal figure display result determination table (illustrated) (Not shown), a universal figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Is becoming The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, 1 being the highest payout rate, the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

20-6(A) to 20-6(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-6(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/99, While the judgment value is set to win the small hit with a probability of 50, if the game state is a probable state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/9.9, and the small hit is with a probability of 1/50. The judgment value is set to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/150, While the judgment value is set to win the small hit with a probability of 1/99, if the game state is a probable change state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/15, and the small hit is with a probability of 1/99. The judgment value is set to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6(C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200. On the other hand, the determination value is set so that if the gaming state is a probable variation state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/20. When the set value is 3, the determination value is set so that the small hit is not won.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the probability that the set value is "1" is the highest for the big hit or the small hit, and the set value is "3". In this case, the judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the game state is the probability change state, the probability that the set value is "1" is the highest for the big hit or the small hit, and the set value is "3" The determination value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) to 20-6(C). If any of the hit judgment values are met, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) to 20-6(C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Also, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to the big hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the design a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the stop symbol in the small hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 20-6(C) is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are the determination values corresponding to the small hit. It is not set as, that is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won You may do it. That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, only one of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

20-7(A) and 20-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Among these, FIG. 20-7 (A) uses the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 20-7 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20-8. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control (probability variation control) and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is executed and shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state, and the big hit B and the big-hit C are set, and after the termination of the big-hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and the variable big-hit A is set. ..

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. The game ends when the big hit game state is entered before is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-7(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, 151 to 200 are assigned to the big hit B, and 201 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 250 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. 251 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 275 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2. 276 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-7(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, 151 to 160 are assigned to the big hit B, and 161 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 170 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. 171 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 180 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 181-299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol and when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the proportion of the big hit type determined as "big hit A" is the same. Is set to. Further, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol with the same set value, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit C" than when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Along with the high ratio, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, the big jack type is determined as "big hit C", the set values are 1, 2 and 3 in that order. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type determined as “big hit A” is the same for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same. Regardless, the example in which the probability variation continuation rate (rate of consecutive holidays) is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation continuation rate (for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( The rate of consecutive holidays may be different.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is accurately changed after the jackpot game ends by determining that the jackpot type is “jackpot B” or “jackpot C” when the variation display result is jackpot. While the control and the time saving control are executed, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A", so that only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that when the variation display result is a big hit, the probability variation control and the time saving control can be performed over a predetermined number of variation displays regardless of the big hit type. It may be executed (so-called multiple-cut probability variation machine).

However, in such a pachinko gaming machine with the number of times cut, it is considered that the probability variation continuation rate (consultation rate) may be different by changing the jackpot probability for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. , In the case of pachinko gaming machines with multiple times of cuts, when the big hit probability is made different for each set value, the number of positive change control and time saving control executed after the big hit game is finished so that the constant probability continuous rate (consistency rate) becomes the same. May be different.

That is, in the set values 1 to 3, the ratio of both the high-accuracy control and the time saving control (the ratio of executing only the time saving control) after the end of the big hit game is the first special value regardless of the setting values. When the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the design and the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special design, the big hit type is determined as "big hit C" which is 16 round big hit. The ratio is highest when the setting value is 1 and lowest when the setting value is 3 (ratio in which the type of big hit is determined as “big hit C”: setting 1>setting 2>setting 3). That is, the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit B”, which is a 5-round big hit, when the setting value is 3 is the highest, and when the setting value is 1 is the lowest (the jackpot type is “big hit B”). Determined by: setting 3> setting 2> setting 1). From the above, regarding the payout rate, the set payout rate of 1 is the highest, and the set value of 3 is the lowest.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C at different rates according to the set value that has been set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined by using the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit C as the big hit type becomes easy to be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game nature itself does not change, the present invention is exemplified. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch).

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table to be used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss to be used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are set. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 20-9(A) and 20-9(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A). And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C. These jackpot variation pattern determination tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the variation pattern determination random value MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 20-9(A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 0 in the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and from 826 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 20-9(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the setting value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 150 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are set. The variation pattern (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hit is assigned, and the variation patterns 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). The set value is higher than the set value and becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-9(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-miss, within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base medium summed pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to the total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss B (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach lose variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “3”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the determination value of MR3 of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach that correspond to the total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the MR3 determination value of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for the loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table D for loss (for medium high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the MR3 determination value of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, 0 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, and 551 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes low in order of 3. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the staging effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

The "common determination rate" in the present embodiment is that the determination rate is completely the same at different setting values (the present embodiment), and the determination rate is the same at different setting values. (For example, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach differs between the set value 1 to the set value 3 by about 1%).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value being set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is shown. The determination rate of only one of the determination rate and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value that is set is Regardless of the above, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different according to the set value, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 20-10, the variation time of the non-reach-miss variation variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages is increased, the variation pattern of non-reach loss with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not reserved memory, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display becomes longer.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-10(A) to 20-10(C), the variation pattern is determined using different variation variation determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the number of pending storage in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is reserved). The variation pattern may be determined by using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which varies depending on the number of memories and the variation display of the second special symbol depending on the number of stored memories of the second special symbol).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss (PA2-2. And PA2-3) have the same range of random number values. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) The appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation display is performed in a variation pattern of super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not limited to the above, considering the jackpot probability and loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the change display is the same ratio in the change pattern of super reach loss. It may be executed.

(Setting change process)
Next, changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-11, the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S8) in the game control main process (see FIG. 3) described above. It is determined whether the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12). If the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa14.

Then, after executing the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) and then executing step S7, when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa11; No), when the door opening sensor 105SG090 is OFF (step 105SGSa12; No). ) Reads the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 105SGSa14, sets the read set value as the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processing of step S10 and thereafter.

20-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. In this setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (step S105SGSa21), and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 105SG029 (step S105SGSa22).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 105SG052 has been operated (step 105SGSa23). When the setting change switch 105SG052 is not operated (step 105SGSa23; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25, and when the setting change switch 105SG052 is operated (step 105SGSa23; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed. The display is updated (step S105SGSa24), and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. In the process of step S105SGSa24, for example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to “2” and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. When "2" is displayed, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed as " The display may be updated to "1".

In step 105SGSa25, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed. When the lock switch 105SG051 is not pushed (step 105SGSa25; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa23, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed (step 105SGSa25; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG0029 is set. At the same time as specifying (step 105SGSa26), the specified setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage for the already stored setting value) (step 105SGSa27). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28). If the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28; Yes), the process of step 105SGSa28 is repeatedly executed, and if the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa28; No), the setting change process is ended.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG051 are ON (setting change processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be performed depending on the combination of ON/OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, the recovery process from the power interruption (recovery process shown in FIG. 3) You can execute In addition, during the execution of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process described above, the variation display of special symbols, the launch of game balls, whether the variation display result is a big hit, various lottery such as big hit type, payout of prize balls, etc. It suffices if it is controlled to a game stopped state in which no processing is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-13(A) and FIG. 20-13(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of the clerk at the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 ends. Turn off the power
When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing, the big winning hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 105SG051 is turned on. And the door open sensor 105SG090 is ON (the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open), the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the display monitor 105SG029 backs up the RAM 102. The setting value stored in the area is displayed.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-13(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 by the store clerk or the like in the game hall. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13(E), the CPU 103 detects the pushing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 by the store clerk or the like in the amusement hall and detects the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the RAM 102. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 105SG029 to notify the store clerk or the like of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-13(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the special winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 terminates the setting change process based on the lock switch 105SG051 being turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall, and the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern. The decision lottery, prize ball payout, etc. are ready to be executed.

In the setting change processing in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process, the setting value most advantageous to the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestive effect, and the second effect. It is possible to execute the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as a suggested production, and when performing the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the reach of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, displaying enemy characters or enemies) is displayed in a mode related to the title subsequently notified. Execution of an effect that suggests a character improves the effect of the effect and allows the player to pay attention to the effect.

The present invention also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052) (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 20-12 by the CPU 103). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A restriction member (for example, a security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting the operation of the operation section,
Equipped with
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, a gaming machine). When the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is restricted, while the game machine frame 105SG003 is opened. 20-2, 20-3, and 20-, the restricted state by the security cover 105SG500A is released and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. 14 to 20-17) are described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 can be prevented from being illegally operated while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, security is improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, a board case 105SG201) that houses the game control board,
Equipped with
The operation section is accommodated in the board case (for example, the setting switch main body section provided with the operation section that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052, is in the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. 20-2, 20-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body using the substrate case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation section so that the operation of the operation section is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulation member is transparent (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of transparent plate-like synthetic resin material, and the substrate case 105SG201 is provided through the security cover.
It is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the game machine. According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since a part of the substrate case 105SG201 can be covered with the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to suppress not only the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also the fraudulent activity on the main substrate 11. Further, since it is possible to check the main board 11 through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions imposed by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it may be possible that an improper act is performed. The confirmation work of can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, a door opening sensor 105SG090),
The setting means does not set a set value even if the operating portion is operated when the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11, game control main processing). In, the CPU 103 describes a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change process is not executed unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12). According to this feature, security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
A game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into a general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-120, a portion where display ratio 105, role ratio, and base can be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into a general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base). ) Is described, and according to this feature, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display pattern determining unit that determines the variable display pattern to any of the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process);
A variable display execution means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes a variable display in the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). In, a portion which determines each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach at different ratios based on the set value that is set) is described, and according to this feature, The player pays attention to the variable display pattern in order to identify the set value that has been set from the determination status of the variable display pattern, so that the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The game control means can control to an advantageous state of any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a big hit game state of a big hit A, a big hit B, or a big hit C) based on a set value that has been set. There
The ratio of the advantageous state to be controlled among a plurality of types of advantageous states is different depending on whether the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value or the second setting value (for example, The part that determines whether the big hit game of big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C is decided depending on whether the set value that is set is 1, 2 or 3 is different. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of the advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserve storage unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning process) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a reserve storage is provided.
When a new setting value is set by the setting means while the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means, the stored hold storage is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 5, A game machine characterized by clearing the pending storage based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the pending storage is crossed before and after the setting change. Since it is not stored, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a big winning opening) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or cannot win the state than the first state,
Control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a big hit open process),
Equipped with
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new setting value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-13). In, the gaming machine is characterized in that the special winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the first state in which the game medium can be won straddles the change of the set value and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.

Further, the present invention also includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
An openable and closable body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003/glass door frame 105SG003a),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052) (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 20-12 by the CPU 103). Part that executes change processing),
A game control means capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A restriction member (for example, a security cover 105SG500A/security cover 105SG500B/security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting the operation of the operation section,
Equipped with
The restricting member is switchable between a first state in which an operation on the operation unit is restricted and a second state in which an operation on the operation unit is not restricted (for example, the security cover 105SG500B covers the substrate case 105SG201 at a covering position). And a covering release position on the right side of the covering position. The security cover 105SG500C has a covering position around the pivot 105SG500Cd and a covering release position rotated from the covering position. Can be rotated between),
When the restriction member is in the second state when the opening/closing body is opened, the opening/closing body cannot be closed unless the restriction member is switched from the second state to the first state (for example, If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-15(B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the uncovering position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the restricted state. The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a unless it is changed, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (Modification 1)./Pachinko gaming machine 1 allows If it is in the state, as shown in FIG. 20-17(B), the security cover 105SG500C must be rotated from the covering release position to the covering position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state). The game machine is described in which the cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a and the game machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed (Modification 2)). According to this feature, security can be improved. More specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the second state remains unchanged, that is, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C remain in the covering release position, so that security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, a board case 105SG201) that houses the game control board,
Equipped with
The operation section is accommodated in the board case (for example, the setting switch main body section provided with the operation section that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052, is in the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. 20-2, 20-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body using the substrate case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation section so that the operation of the operation section is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulation member is transparent (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of a transparent synthetic resin material and are accommodated in the substrate case 105SG201 through a security cover. It is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like which are displayed). According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since a part of the substrate case 105SG201 can be covered with the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to suppress not only the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also the fraudulent activity on the main substrate 11. Further, since it is possible to check the main board 11 through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions imposed by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it may be possible that an improper act is performed. The confirmation work of can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, a door opening sensor 105SG090),
The setting means does not set the set value even if the operating section is operated when the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening/closing body (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11, game control main processing). In the above, there is described a gaming machine characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12). According to this characteristic, security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
A game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into a general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-120, a portion where display ratio 105, role ratio, and base can be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
A game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening, and a game ball has been inserted into a general winning opening). (The part where the prize balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special winning opening)
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base). ) Is described, and according to this feature, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A variable display pattern determining unit that determines the variable display pattern to any of the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process);
A variable display execution means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes a variable display in the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). In, a portion which determines each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach at different ratios based on the set value that is set) is described, and according to this feature, The player pays attention to the variable display pattern in order to identify the set value that has been set from the determination status of the variable display pattern, so that the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means can control to an advantageous state of any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a big hit game state of a big hit A, a big hit B, or a big hit C) based on a set value that has been set. There
The ratio of the advantageous state to be controlled among a plurality of types of advantageous states is different depending on whether the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value or the second setting value (for example, The part that determines whether the big hit game of big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C is decided depending on whether the set value that is set is 1, 2 or 3 is different. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of the advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserve storage unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning process) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a reserve storage is provided.
When a new setting value is set by the setting means while the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means, the stored hold storage is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 5, A game machine characterized by clearing the pending storage based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the pending storage is crossed before and after the setting change. Since it is not stored, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a big winning opening) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or cannot win the state than the first state,
Control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a big hit open process),
Equipped with
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new setting value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-13). In, the gaming machine is characterized in that the special winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the first state in which the game medium can be won straddles the change of the set value and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be made even if changes or additions are made without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, the form in which the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 105SG001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-14(A) and 20-14(B), a security cover 105SG500B including a short piece 105SG500Ba and a long piece 105SG500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the board case 105SG201. The right end of the long piece 105SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to lock it through the through hole 105SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 105SG500Bb. The switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500B (long piece 105SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 105SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to release the state in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-14(A) and 20-14(B), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the substrate case 105SG201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 105SG500B with respect to the board case 105SG201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 20-15(A), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 105SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 105SG201. By sliding the board case 105SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the permissible state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to perform the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-15(B), the security cover 105SG500B is mounted on the board case 105SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 105SG201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, and it becomes impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. Has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 remains in the allowed state and the gaming machine frame 105SG is used.
Since it is possible to prevent 003 from being closed, the security cover 105SG500B forgets to cover the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052, that is, for the game machine without restricting the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to prevent the frame 105SG003 from being closed and improve the security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 105SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 105SG001a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 105SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the state in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered by the security cover 105SG500B is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-16A and 20-16B as a second modification, the left end portion of the security cover 105SG500C is provided at the gaming machine. A cover position covering the right side portion of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and a pivot position from the cover position centering on the pivot 105SG500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 105SG003 and oriented in the up-down direction. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the coating release position. In such a case, when closing the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the front end of the short piece 105SG500Ca is locked by the locking portion 105SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the long piece 105SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 105SG051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201, thereby turning the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted while the security cover 105SG500C (long piece 105SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated with respect to the substrate case 105SG201 around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to turn the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-17(A), the security cover 105SG500C in the present modification 2 is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the allowance state), thereby A store clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-17(B), the security cover 105SG500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 105SG500C causes a lock switch. If the 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500C abuts on the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. Therefore, the lock cover 105SG051 set by the security cover 105SG500C is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 105SG003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is provided. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 105SG003a. In addition, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 105SG003a in this way, it is shown as a modified example 3 in FIGS. 20-18(A) to 20-18(C). As described above, the through hole 105SG003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through hole 105SG003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through hole 105SG003b in this way, a door body 105SG003c that can open and close the through hole 105SG003b is provided, and the door body 105SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-18(B) and 20-18(C), when the door body 105SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 105SG003a. Since 105SG003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 105SG003a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game using a game ball is disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each winning hole in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disclosed. The number of game spheres entering the (special winning opening, the second winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening) is totaled, and the ratio, winning ratio, base, etc. based on the totaling are performed. The various winning information may be calculated. In addition, in the case where the winning information can be calculated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-19(A) as a modified example 4, the display monitor 105SG029 shows the winning ratio as the winning ratio, the winning ratio, The base or the like may be displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-19(A) and 20-19(B), the display monitor 105SG029 according to the fourth modification includes a first display unit 105SG029105SG0A, a second display unit 105SG029B, and a third display. The unit 105SG029C, the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the fifth display unit 105SG029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display unit 105SG029A to fifth display unit 105SG029E
Can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 20-19B is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. The aggregated setting values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display portion 105SG029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display portion 105SG029B of the second digit and the third display portion 105SG029C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed as percentages on the fourth display portion 105SG029D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 105SG029E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

Here, the short term means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for which the total sum is obtained means a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state in the high base state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentages (%) is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on the 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

In the fourth modification, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 105SG029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-20(A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20-20(A), when the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-2), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-3). Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. The total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-4), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Then, when the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term serial ratio of the display No. 1 to the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 105SG029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

Further, these short-term serial ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative serial ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 20-20(A) and 20-20(B-1) to FIG. 20. As shown in -20 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 105SG030, when the setting value is "1", the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base. 1, the display of base 2, when the set value is "2", short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display to the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning percentage, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning percentage, the base 1, and the base 2. In the case where the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "1", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E are also displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

Note that the display monitor 105SG029 of Modification 4 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. The 105SG029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratios, winning combinations, and bases.

Also, in the present fourth modification, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 without calculating the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

Further, in the present fourth modification, on the display monitor 105SG029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Modification 5)

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The change of the setting value of may be executable during the game. In addition, when changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game, for example, first, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and then turns on the lock switch 105SG051 to turn on the display monitor 105SG029. After the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed, a clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to change the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. Then, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade pushes the lock switch 105SG051 to set the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 as a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to the backup area of the RAM 102. Just store it. After the new set value is set, the data such as the special figure reservation storage and the general figure reservation storage may be erased. In this way, by clearing the data such as special figure hold storage, general figure hold storage, etc., a change in the set value may cause a new hold storage where the variable display result will be a big hit, and a new variable It is possible to prevent the prize winning ball device 6B from being opened (a common figure hit occurs) and the fluctuation display result during execution being unreasonably a big hit.

(Other disclosure contents)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 capable of opening/closing the opening of the outer frame 105SG001a and the glass door frame 105SG003a capable of opening/closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 are applied as the opening/closing body is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing the front opening of the housing, such as a slot machine. Further, not only the one that can be opened and closed by rotating, but also the one that can be opened and closed by sliding or attaching and detaching.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are applied as the operation unit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not limited to this. Only one of them may be used, or another operation unit such as another switch, button, lever, dial, touch sensor or the like having a different operation mode (for example, pulling operation, pushing operation, rotating operation, etc.) may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C is applied as the restricting member, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is not a covering member, the shape, size, material and the like can be changed in various ways as long as it is a member capable of restricting the operation of the operation portion. Specifically, for example, the operation unit may not be covered, but the operation of the operation unit may be restricted by contacting the operation unit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C as the restricting member may be in an inoperable state by covering the operating portion in the restricted state of the operating portion, and are not always in the inoperable state. Does not have to be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the setting switching main body portion having the operation portion such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main board 11 may be provided on a separate board, may be housed in a case other than the board case 105SG201, or may not be housed in the board case 105SG201.

In Modifications 1 and 2, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C as the restricting members exemplify a form in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed in the uncovered position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of closing the gaming machine frame 105SG003, for example, an interlocking mechanism or the like that interlocks according to the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided so that the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C return to the covering position from the covering release position. May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the board case 105SG201 provided with the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switch 105SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, a place other than the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a glass door frame on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 105SG003a, or at the outer frame 105SG001a).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving a variable display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, and depending on the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which winning is possible.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 112IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be combined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-8(A), a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 is invisible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 21-2 and 21-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. In addition, the security cover 112
The IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 21-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. When separated, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released and the state becomes an operable state.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 112IW, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the setting keys 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052, the setting switch 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right side of the back of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the security cover 112IW500A allows the substrate to pass through. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the seal and the like.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, the CPU 10
3 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In the feature part 112IW, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-4 and 21-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-4(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 21-4(B), and FIG. -4(C), the display result determination table (setting value 3), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 21-5(A), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 112IW, the winning probability for a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
21-4(A) to 21(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, with respect to each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 21-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability (1/300 when non-probable change, 1/30 when probable change) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small, with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable variation, 1/28 in the probable variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The small win is achieved with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 21-4(A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-4(A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 21-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In addition, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, a case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, similarly to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 112IW may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-4(A) to (C). The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using different tables for the case where the variation special map designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case is shown in which the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3”. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be increased in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the set value of 1 to 3 is provided as a set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 21-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature section 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type among jackpot type A to jackpot type C. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-5(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned the determination values corresponding to the random numbers. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

As shown in FIG. 21-5(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the percentage determined as the jackpot type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 21-5(B). In the present feature portion 112IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit game state is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the effect control board 12 side is finished, Is a period during which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

As shown in FIG. 21-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the setting value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period, that is, to delay the progress of the game, and thus the gambling probability Can be prevented from becoming too high.

In this feature section 112IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Further, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, common effects may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A<B<C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In any one of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present characteristic portion 112IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state. In the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot rate differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence/absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, but for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of times of control are different for each big hit type, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic unit 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case has been shown in which the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined using the random number MR2 which is a big hit type determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game nature itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern determination table)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined, and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 21-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables for non-special period).

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 21-6(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

21-6 (A) and (B), the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables are normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3". The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of performing normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super-reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or the difference between special periods and non-special periods). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only in a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). 21-6(B), specifically, in the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6(B), in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3” Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value, and The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

In the characteristic part 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 and variable display of effect symbols is performed. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, the variation display mode of the effect design is a variation pattern different from the normal, and the setting value is 1 or 2). May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 21-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss variation, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As illustrated in FIG. 21-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach-miss variation C (variation time of 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is “2”. If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and thus the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the feature part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the feature part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the proportion of the non-reach loses A to C different in the variation time according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time for the display of the effect symbol to be swayed or the high-speed variation display is made different so that the effect of the production etc. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the final effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is set to be different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening, which has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. With such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the variation time may be varied according to the set value even for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling, and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base based on the totaling.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-8(A) and 21-8(B), the display monitor 112IW029 includes a first display unit 112IW029A, a second display unit 112IW029B, a third display unit 112IW029C, and a fourth display unit 112IW029B. The display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display section 112IW029A to the fifth display section 112IW029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 21-8(B) is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. The aggregated setting values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first digit first display section 112IW029A, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second digit second display section 112IW029B and the third digit third display section 112IW029C. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 112IW029D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 112IW029E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

Here, the short term means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for which the total sum is obtained means a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or a total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state in the high base state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentage of the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In such a case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative ratio of display No4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display section 112IW029C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 21-9(A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 21-9(A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 21-9(B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 21-9(B-2), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Also, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display 112IW029D and the fifth display 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-3), the setting value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the second display 112IW029D and the fifth display 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term serial ratio of the display No. 1 to the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

21-9 (A) and 21-9 (B-1) to FIG. 21 are displayed for the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, and base 2. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base when the setting value is "1". 1, the display of base 2, when the set value is "2", short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, and base 2. It should be noted that when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display part 112IW029A is updated to "2", and the 4th display part 112IW029D and the 5th display part 112IW are updated.
The values of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 displayed on 029E are switched to the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The ratio, base 1 and base 2 numerical values are switched to the set value “3”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display part 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the 4th display part 112IW029D and the 5th display part 112IW029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value "1".

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded prize balls on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term serial ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW will be described. 21-10 and 21-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In this characteristic part 112IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means start waiting timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means start waiting timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103, for example, sets a factory-shipped setting flag in the RAM 102 that indicates that the factory-shipped settings are retained (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and a recovery process described later are executed Is set, and is cleared when the setting change processing described later is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Note that, without being limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default setting is left (for example, “0” or “−”) is set, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be possible to confirm whether or not the value remains at the factory default value. If the settings are the same as the factory settings (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E").

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9 in the storage area of the RAM 102. It is cleared, and information for performance display such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is not cleared and retained. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), and the output signal from the clear switch is off ( In (N) of step 112IWS013, the process does not move to step 112IWS014 but moves to the loop process.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the settings for factory shipment are still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if an electric power interruption or the like occurs during setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. The RAM is cleared on the condition that it is possible to change the set value after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs the recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command for instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102, the area for storing performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9, and the set value. Areas other than the area for storing are cleared, and performance display information such as continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, base, and setting value information are not cleared and retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating that the setting change process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to inform that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted, or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

Note that the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 in the present characteristic unit 112IW is performed as shown in FIG.
This is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 21-12(A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. Note that, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting confirmation error and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the command being received on the side of the production control CPU 120. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 21-12(B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting change error and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process so that the error state is continued and the process does not proceed until the power is turned on again. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009, 112IWS014), The error condition will be released.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 21-13 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 21-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is turned off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. To be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-14(A) and 21-14(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 21-14(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the store clerk in the amusement hall. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, such as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14(E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk at the game hall. Stored in the backup area of (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 21-14(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and becomes in a state in which a game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature part 112IW will be described. 21-15 and 21-16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 112IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112 IWS 108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value, fluctuation pattern commands for the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands for the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 112IWS011) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 112IWS108) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected with a setting value of 3, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is selected. The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to send a background designating command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module compares the predetermined jackpot determination value or the jackpot determination value (see FIG. 21-4) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines the jackpot or the jackpot. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit has been made (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, when it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is the jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 21-5) to identify the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may decide to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to the big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 112IW will be described. 21-17 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic control unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201), and thereafter. It returns to the process of step S73.

In the present feature part 112IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12,
The effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A→effect mode B→effect mode C→effect mode A→. You may make it change randomly from the modes A to C.

(Command analysis process)

21-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112 IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 112IWS306).

In the characteristic part 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the production control board 12 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the restoration processing is executed. The configuration may be configured such that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change processing is performed, but the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the feature section 112IW sends the set value command for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

In addition, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the side of the production control CPU 120, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that cannot be set such as “5” or “10”. If the setting value command is abnormal, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the new set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command is not normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the characteristic part 112IW, when one of the initialization designation command, the restoration command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the production control board 12 side. In the image display device 5, a control for displaying a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols, which is displayed in the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed. Perform (hereinafter also referred to as the initial appearance).

If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial result determination table, an even number of initial combinations (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even production symbols, and a combination of odd production symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of effect symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

21-19 is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table. In step 112IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 21-19(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game is started, if the odd-numbered initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared with the case where the even-numbered initial outcome is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-19(A), the special initial appearance may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, which can enhance the interest.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS310). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1”, and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 21-19(A) (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the characteristic unit 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 21-19(A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being determined as the odd initial hits are the lowest, and the odd initial hits are not determined in some cases. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result despite the disadvantageous set value, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If not in the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

21-19(B) is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21-19(B), in the initial result determination table for effect mode C, the odd initial initial result is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. Despite the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 112IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome to be an even initial outcome and the image display device 5 At, the control for displaying the even-numbered initial result is performed (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the present characteristic part 112IW uniformly displays even initial numbers when the set value command is not normally received and the production mode is B. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying odd initial numbers and special initial numbers despite the disadvantageous set values, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to determine the odd initial winning symbol at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye symbol.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally in the setting value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation processing end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change processing has not been executed, the production control CPU 120 , The even-numbered initial number is determined, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even-numbered initial number (step 112IWS317). In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial roll. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received production control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS318), the production control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume voice or an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to emit white light.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

Note that the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the odd-numbered initial rolls are not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but the odd-numbered rolls may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Also, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial numbers and even-numbered initial numbers, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), or an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, only when the setting value is 3, the specific initial result is determined, and when the specific initial result is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present characteristic part 112IW, the set value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the set value, a pre-game suggestive effect that is executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to perform suggestion during game execution that is performed during display of variation of the effect pattern, setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and suggestion during big hit during big hit (for example, during big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that, in the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effect or initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or the execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
21-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fluctuation start command reception flag (for example, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Check if there is any (step 112 IWS
401).

When the fluctuation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the fluctuation start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

If the variation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). It is confirmed (step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the result of timing by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game is not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS409). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the characteristic part 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

21-21 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21(A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 21-21(A), the determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-21(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS411). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 112IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS411 to S412, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 21-21(A), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

21-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-21(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS416. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, in the feature unit 112IW, if the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is the production mode B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

Note that the execution ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-21(A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes, the executed ratio may be different depending on the set value. You may

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the pre-game suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 21-21(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21(A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history showing the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect (in-game suggestive effect or big hit suggestive effect), execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (initial effect effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) are shown. It is also possible to store the information and execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and notifying the set value. It should be noted that this effect notifies the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution situation of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the characteristic part 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, by the processing of step 112IWS416, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made to be interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information about the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server uses the received information. You may make it manage the game history of a player, and perform the process which gives a predetermined privilege according to the game history. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image indicating the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
21-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the game suggested effect determination process. The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS502) and is not in the special period. In the case (N in step 112IWS501), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, By using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS505).

21-23(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 21-23(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23(A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only during the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS506). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value is “1” and uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the characteristic unit 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command is not normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), with respect to the setting value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect itself is low, and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not in the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS509).

21-23(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21-23(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, in the feature unit 112IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the suggestion during game is not executed, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by executing the suggestive effect during game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 21-23 (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the feature part 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode according to the set value). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, a different mode suggestive effect during game may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the presence/absence of execution of in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are configured to be different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher rate of executing the in-game suggestion effect. Alternatively, the reliability when the suggestion during game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggestive effect during game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

Further, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than that in the former), the former is more likely to perform the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the in-game suggestive effect is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
21-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit midtime performance determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestion effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first variation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, and for example, the first variation after the end of the last series of games. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the game start time to the variable display being performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestive effect determination table in which the presence/absence of a big hit suggestive effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

21-25 (A) and (B), in the first and second big hit medium suggestion effect determination table, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, which suggests that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the big hit midway suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

In the present feature part 112IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), the effect pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. 21-26 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), in the image display device 5, after a big hit effect symbol is stopped and displayed, 21-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS603). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect execution and the effect mode by using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to prevent the situation that the player loses interest in playing games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect during the big hit and the effect mode by using the big hit midpoint suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 21-25(C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-25(C), in the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate of determining to execute the big hit medium suggestive effect itself is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. It is possible to prevent a situation where the big hit medium suggestion production is executed by the second production aspect, the third production aspect, and the third production aspect to cause the player to be discouraged, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS607. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not performing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25(A), when the big hit occurs in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit medium suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In the present feature part 112IW, the big hit medium suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode) is different, the execution ratio of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode and the fourth production mode is different according to the set value, the set value It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 112IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 21-26 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory production is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. It becomes difficult to see the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature portion 112IW, the big hit mid-game suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, so that the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 112IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 112IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25(D) is used to prevent the character effect from being executed when the mid-hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-game suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-game suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It may be performed during the ending period) to prevent the suggestion during big hit from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so that the movable member 112IW101 does not stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-25(D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence/absence of the light guide plate effect when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608) (step 112IWS609).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 112IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided, and the light guide plate 112IW103 is It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light entering the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the "big hit" is given. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 while the light guide plate effect is being performed.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25(E), the light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios depending on the presence/absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the big hit suggestion effect of the first effect mode is performed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is suggested. When the effect is executed, the proportion of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to be visually recognized. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game, due to the suggestion during the big hit, which is an undesired presentation mode for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of one of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the characteristic part 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, when an error occurs, an error displayed on the image display device 9 is displayed. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, in the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the big hit suggestive effect (for example, a specific effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestive effect For example, the suggestion during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body on which the effect symbol is arranged. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body on which the effect symbol is arranged (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first fluctuation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including control for outputting a predetermined sound, control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and control for causing a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be turned to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 112IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. The setting may be suggested by.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the holding memory being 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit holding memory number (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

Although the characteristic portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 112IW, the form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 21-28(A) and 21-28(B), a security cover 112IW500B including a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the board case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set through the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to the. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-28(A) and 21-28(B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 21-29(A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to play the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 21-29(B), the security cover 112IW500B is mounted on the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. If it is not slid relative to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 112IW051 set by the security cover 112IW500B is set. Changeover switch 112IW
It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover 052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within the range in which the state where the security cover 112IW500B covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 21-30(A) and 21-30(B) as a modified example 2, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is a gaming machine. A cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and a pivot position from the covering position, centering on a pivot 112IW500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003 and faces vertically. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the coating release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 112IW051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

When the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 being covered. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-31(A), the security cover 112IW500C according to the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 112IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a store clerk or the like operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 21-31(B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 112IW500C sets a key. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500C abuts on the front end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 remains in the allowed state and the gaming machine frame 112IW
Since it is possible to prevent 003 from being closed, it is possible to forget to cover the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 with the security cover 112IW500C, that is, for the gaming machine without restricting the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to prevent the frame 112IW003 from being closed and improve the security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the form in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 112IW003a. 21-32(A) to 21-32(C) as a modified example 3 in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way. As described above, the through hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated via the through hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

In this way, when the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through hole 112IW003b, the door 112IW003c that can open and close the through hole 112IW003b is provided, and the door 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 21-32(B) and 21-32(C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed to close the door body. Since 112IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the characteristic portion 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a thing, a game machine characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604) is described. According to this feature, In the gaming machine configured to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the decision data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS412, S507, S604 based on the setting value "1")
However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity.

It should be noted that, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" includes not only determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or a pre-game suggestive effect or It is described that it is possible to execute the initial performance etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and play the game from an early time slot. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 21-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, refer to FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of performing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) may differ depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) according to the set value that is set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 21 is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) is also described, and such a configuration improves security.

Further, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 112IWS413 N, S508). N, N in S605, a game machine characterized by not performing pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, and jackpot suggestion effect) is described, and according to this feature, the set setting In the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the value, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or a pre-game suggestive effect or It is described that it is possible to execute the initial performance etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and play the game from an early time slot. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 21-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, refer to FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of performing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) may differ depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) according to the set value that is set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the second invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 21 is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) is also described, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606 to not perform the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestive effect determination table, and the big hit suggestive effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606) may be performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or a pre-game suggestive effect or It is described that it is possible to execute the initial performance etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and play the game from an early time slot. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect may be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 21-23(A), (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, refer to FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of performing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) may differ depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) according to the set value that is set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the third invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. 21 is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) is also described, and such a configuration improves security.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the setting value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, If the player is able to perform the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described first invention), and if the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-described second invention configuration), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the case is shown in which the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described third invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any one of the first invention to the third invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the first invention), if the game state is a time saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of suggestive effect is limited (the second invention of the above). If the game state is a probability change state, and the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is executable as the suggestion effect ( The above configuration of the third invention) may be performed.

In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by any of the control methods of the first invention to the third invention described above, and it is possible to perform the suggestive effect by using only one of the control methods. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to a missed item, garbled data, or the like, the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled by the control method according to the first invention to the third invention (implication). Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the side of the effect control means is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the setting value indicated by the setting value command received in step 1 and the previously stored setting value do not match, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the set value is an odd number such as "1" or "3", a series of holidays (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a holiday will occur. It is configured so that the difference from when it is difficult is large, and in the case of even-numbered setting values such as the setting value “2”, it is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command is not normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. It may be configured to perform (limit the suggestive effect).

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means, at least, a suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. And an initial result production, etc.) are described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, production design),
The suggestion effect execution means, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, suggestive effect in which different identification information for effect is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that the odd number initial display result) may be executed, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 21). -21(A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values may be used). Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion during game play or a suggestion during big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6(A), (B), and 21-23(A), (B)). According to this feature, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game for a predetermined period of time and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 21-6(A), ( B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the setting value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 21-6(A) and (B)),
The variable display executing means is capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, that the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). 21-25 (e.g., when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestive effect can be executed during a big hit). A) and (B)), and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23(A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which is further provided with a notifying unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the performed suggested effect. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to check the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notifying means may notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416), and according to such a configuration. Amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means may notify the content of the executed suggestive effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416), and according to such a configuration. Amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means may be able to notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while the customer is not waiting for variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute step S112IWS416). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be imaged by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The seventh aspect of the invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 112IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (D)) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 21-25(D). ) May be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode).
It is described that the IW101 may be operated (for example, control is performed so that the IW101 is not stopped at a position overlapping with a serif image by a suggestion during a big hit), and such a configuration prevents a decrease in interest. can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect that displays a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive performance with priority over the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The eighth aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 112IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting production which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. A gaming machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). According to such a configuration, The staging effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting body to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting value is set to the first set value (for example, suggestive presentation during big hit in the first presentation mode. See FIGS. 21-25(A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second set value that is more advantageous for the player than the first set value (for example, suggestion during jackpot in the third effect mode. FIG. 21-25 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 21-25(E)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management It is also possible to change the setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating)). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. ..

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The ninth aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 112IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs according to a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the fanfare control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value that is set (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5(B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the interval control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value that is set (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5(B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the ending control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5(B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 21-5(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that, in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the set value being set (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided, With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state regardless of the set value that is set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to multiple types of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the type of the advantageous state (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5(B)). According to such a configuration, It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes a tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) relating to variable display differs according to a set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 21-7). According to this, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
It is described that the variable display period may be different (for example, refer to FIG. 21-7) depending on the set value that is set, and such a configuration causes the gambling performance to be too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different according to the set value that is set, and such a configuration may result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and such a configuration causes the gambling performance to be too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means may determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (for example, refer to FIG. 21-7). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base). It is described that it is good, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic part 112IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by other characteristic parts such as the characteristic part 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the mid-hit suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic portion 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the mid-hit suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect. At this time, a title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the characteristic part 31AK.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic parts 261F to 263F)
Next, the characteristic parts 261F to 263F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic parts 261F to 263F, a description will be given of control for executing a specific effect based on operation detection by a detection unit capable of detecting the operation (operation) of the player, such as the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B. The characteristic portion 261F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-1 to 22-8 and the like. The characteristic part 262F will be described with reference to FIG. The characteristic portion 263F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-10 to 22-12 and the like.

The configuration described in the following characteristic units 261F to 263F may or may not be applied to the configuration capable of executing the setting confirmation process and the setting change process of the jackpot probability described above. In addition, the effects described in the following characteristic units 261F to 263F may be used as effects that can suggest a set value such as the jackpot probability in a pachinko gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability and the like described above can be changed. For example, depending on the type of the set value of the jackpot probability that is currently set, a part of the effect modes of the various effects described below may be made different so that the set value such as the jackpot probability can be suggested.

[Explanation Regarding Characteristic Section 261F]
The characteristic part 261F will be described. In the effect control CPU 120, a meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display shown in the image in response to the detection of a continuous operation of the push button 31B (hereinafter, referred to as continuous hits) as a continuous operation by the player's own force. In addition to the above, for example, the automatic continuous hit determination that determines that the continuous push of the push button 31B is performed at a predetermined interval based on the detection of a predetermined motion of the player different from the continuous hit, such as a long press operation of the push button 31B. In response to the display, the meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display is executed.

In the meter effect, various effect controls as described below are executed. FIG. 22-1 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the meter effect. 22-1 (A) to (D) when the variation display in the variation pattern of the special reach (for example, the third super reach and the fourth super reach described later) predetermined as the specific variation pattern is executed. A meter effect as shown in is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-1(A), at the start of the special reach, the image display device 5 variably displays the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative patterns are displayed by moving from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the corners of the display area. These decorative patterns form a reach pattern in which the "left" and "right" decorative patterns stop at the same pattern and the "middle" pattern is variably displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 22A to 22D, a meter image 261F001 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5. The meter image 261F001 is an image that has so-called meter values and has a plurality of scales (11 scales) in the vertical direction. Meter image 261F0
The 01 scale has a structure in which one special stage "MAX scale" is provided on top of 10 "normal scales". In the meter image 261F001, in response to the operation of the push button 120 by the player being detected within the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the scales are partially colored in the first color (blank part in the figure). ) To the second color (hatched portion of the pattern), the meter value is displayed in the second color. The meter value changes (increases) from the bottom to the top as indicated by the dashed arrow in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 22-1(A) to 22(D), a predetermined character image 261F005 is displayed on the right side of the meter image 261F001 (the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5). Below the character image 261F005, a button image 261F002 composed of an image simulating the push button 31B and a character image of “continuous hit!” is displayed. The display of the button image 261F002 promotes the player's operation of operating (continuously hitting) the push button 31B.

As shown in FIGS. 22-1(A) to (D), an operation effective period image 261F004 indicating the operation effective period of the push button 31B is displayed below the button image 261F002 by a bar graph type meter display in a horizontal bar mode. It In the operation valid period image 261F004, the operation valid period is indicated by the horizontal meter value (black portion in the figure) which is displayed in a reduced direction in the direction of the broken arrow in the figure.

Regarding the special reach effect, when it is decided to shift to the first development effect, after the start of the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. 22-1(B), the game within the operation valid period. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level L5 by the self-powered continuous hitting or the automatic continuous hitting of the push button 31B by the person's operation, the process proceeds to the first development effect.

Further, in the case of the special reach effect, if it is decided to shift to the second development effect, after the start of the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level L10 by the self-powered continuous hitting or the automatic continuous hitting of the push button 31B by the player's action, the process proceeds to the second development effect.

In addition, in the case where the special reach effect is decided to be shifted to the special development effect, after the start of the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level MAX of the special stage by the self-powered continuous hit or the automatic continuous hit of the push button 31B by the operation of the player, the special development effect is entered.

Next, the relationship between the detection determination and the change in the meter display of the meter image 261F001 will be described for each of the self-powered continuous hit and the automatic continuous hit.

FIG. 22-2 is a timing chart showing the detection determination and the meter display change in each of the self-powered continuous hit and the automatic continuous hit. In FIG. 22-2, (A) shows a timing chart of continuous hitting by itself, and (B) shows a timing chart of automatic continuous hitting.

22-2(A) and (B), (a) ON/OFF of player motion detection, (b) ON/OFF of determination of self-hit or auto-hit, (c) Meter when determining deviation. The level of the display and the level of the meter display at the time of (d) jackpot determination are shown.

First, the continuous hitting by itself will be described with reference to FIG. Within the effective period of operation,
As in (a) and (b), each time the short push operation of the push button 31B is detected, it is determined by the effect control CPU 120 that the player has repeatedly hit by himself. Every time the self-beating is detected and determined, as shown in (c) and (d), the display level of the meter value of the meter image 261F001 (the display number of the second color) is increased step by step. Done.

When the special development effect is not selected and it is determined not to shift to the special development effect, when the continuous hit by the player is detected and determined within the operation valid period, the meter value reaches the maximum level L10 as shown in (c). The control for limiting the increase in the meter value is performed so that the level can be reached but the level MAX cannot be reached.

When the special development effect is determined to be shifted to the special development effect, if the continuous hitting is detected and determined within the operation valid period, the meter value can reach the maximum level L10 as shown in (d). After that, the meter value is automatically controlled so as to exceed the level L10 and reach the level MAX regardless of the repeated hits by itself.

As described above, in this embodiment, when self-powered continuous hits are executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the maximum level L10 in response to the detection of the self-powered continuous hits. Then, when it is determined not to shift to the special development effect, the change of the meter display due to the self-hitting stops at the maximum level L10, and when it is determined to shift to the special development effect, the meter display is automatically changed. The control is executed to reach the level MAX beyond the level L10.

Next, automatic continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. When a long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific period (for example, 1 second) or more is detected within the operation valid period as shown in (e) and (f), it is considered that continuous hits have been performed at predetermined time intervals. Repeated hits are judged.

When the automatic continuous hit determination determines that the automatic continuous hits are performed, as in (f), it is determined that the continuous hits have been executed at a predetermined time interval, and each time the determination is made, (g) and (h) are determined. In addition, the display in which the display level (the number of display of the second color) of the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is increased step by step is displayed. The predetermined time interval at which it is determined that the repeated hits have been performed by the automatic repeated hits is longer than the time interval at which it is determined that the self-made repeated hits have been performed. As a result, the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the automatic repeated hits is controlled to be slower than the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the continuous hits by the player.

When the special development effect is determined not to shift to the special development effect and the automatic continuous hit is detected and determined within the operation valid period, the meter value reaches the maximum level L5 as shown in (g). The control for limiting the increase in the meter value is performed so that the level can be reached but the level MAX cannot be reached.

When the special development effect is decided to shift to the special development effect, if the automatic repeated hits are detected and determined within the operation valid period, the meter value can reach the maximum level L5 as shown in (h). After that, the meter value is automatically controlled to exceed the level L5 and reach the level MAX regardless of the automatic repeated hits.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the automatic repeated hits are executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the maximum level L5 in response to the detection of the continuous hits by the user. Then, when it is determined not to shift to the special development effect, the change of the meter display due to the automatic continuous hitting stops at the maximum level L5, and when it is determined to shift to the special development effect, the meter display is automatically changed. The control is executed to reach the level MAX beyond the level L5.

In this way, by comparing the time when the automatic repeated hits are performed with the time when the automatic repeated hits are performed, the automatic continuous hits are detected and determined at a time interval shorter than the determination time interval of the automatic continuous hits. Then, when a meter effect in which the meter value cannot reach the level MAX is executed, the maximum changeable meter value with self-repeated hits is the level L10, and the maximum changeable meter value with auto continuous hits is the level. It is L5. When a meter effect in which the meter value can reach the level MAX is executed, the maximum changeable meter value with self-repeated hits is level L10, and the maximum changeable meter value with auto repeated hits is level L5. After that, at a predetermined timing, for each of self-powered continuous hits and automatic continuous hits, a display is made such that the meter value automatically reaches from the current level to the level MAX regardless of the operation.

By the effect control shown in FIGS. 22-1 and 22-2, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) When performing the meter effect as the specific effect based on the detection and determination of the self-powered continuous hit, the meter effect when executing the meter effect based on the detection and the determination of the automatic continuous hit. In comparison with level L5, which is the maximum changeable meter value, the specific stage of the maximum changeable meter value of the meter effect is set to a level L10 so as to perform continuous self-strike. It is possible to make the player feel the significance.

(2) When the production mode of the meter production reaches the level L5 which is the predetermined stage within the operation valid period, it is possible to shift to the first development production, and the production mode of the meter production reaches the level L10 which is the specific stage. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to the second development effect. As a result, when the performance mode of the meter effect reaches the predetermined stage and when it reaches the specific level, the type of the performance mode to which the performance mode of the meter effect is developed is different, so that the player continues by himself. The action can be promoted.

(3) When it is decided not to shift to the special development effect in the meter effect, the level MAX, which is the special step of the meter effect, is a step in the effect mode that cannot be reached when executing the self-hit. As a result, when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, even if the player hits himself by himself at too high a speed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 side is set so as not to reach the level MAX. It is possible to determine the stage of the production mode that can be reached by.

(4) The automatic continuous hit is determined based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, for example, when the variable display is determined to be the jackpot display result and the transition to the special development effect is determined. Then, within the operation valid period, the meter value is controlled to exceed the level L5 and reach MAX as shown in (h), so that the interest of the player who continuously hits the ball is reduced. Can be prevented.

Next, the variation patterns used in the characteristic units 261F to 263F will be described. FIG. 22-3 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, a fluctuation pattern table used to determine a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern described below is designated by a variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display is executed.

FIG. 22C shows a normal state deviation determination table in (a), and a time reduction deviation determination table in (b). Further, (c) shows a normal big hit judgment table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit judgment table. Each of the determination tables in FIGS. 22-3(a) to (d) is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the game state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

“Normal reach” in each table of FIG. 22-3 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach in which a particularly flashy effect is not executed when the reach state is reached. “Super reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached. In addition, the “super reach” is a variation pattern that has a higher selection rate when a big hit occurs and is more reliable than a “normal reach”. “Super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach”. Four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the jackpot expectation degree (the possibility of a jackpot) in the relationship of 1st superreach <2nd superreach <3rd superreach <4th superreach ) Is high.

The “expectation degree” is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also called reliability) for a big hit is the degree of expectation (a proportion of a big hit) that a big hit occurs when each reach variation pattern is selected. For example, the reach variation is performed 100 times. If it is a big hit 60 times, the expectation degree for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for a probability change refers to the degree of expectation of transition to a probability change state (probability of probability change).

Next, a description will be given of a development effect selection table used for selectively deciding whether or not it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the special development effect in the meter effect when the big hit is determined. FIG. 22-4 is a diagram showing a special development effect selection table in a table format. The special development effect selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

The special development effect selection table includes a third special reach-time special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(A) and a fourth special reach-time special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(B). ing. The third special reach time special development effect selection table is used when executing the third super reach. The fourth special reach time special development effect selection table is used when executing the fourth super reach.

In the special development effect selection table of FIGS. 22-4(A) and (B), the special development effect selection random number SR2 (numerical value range of 0 to 99) as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. 100 numerical values in total are allocated to the determination that the special development effect can be selected and the determination that the different development effect cannot be selected. Regarding SR2, the number of allocated random number SR2 values is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the third special reach time special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(A), the special development effect is set such that the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing has a relationship of "selectable <unselectable". The data is set so that the ratio of making the selection impossible becomes higher. On the other hand, in the fourth special reach time special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(B), the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing causes the special relationship such that “selectable>not selectable” is established. The data is set so that the rate at which the development effect can be selected is higher.

As a result, the fourth super-reach, which has a high expectation of a big hit, has a higher selection ratio of the execution of the special development effect than the third super-reach. Therefore, when the special development effect is executed, the big hit occurs. The player's expectation about can be increased. When the special development performance is not executed because the special development performance may be selected both when the big hit is decided and when the big hit is decided. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and deteriorating the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the selection decision as to whether or not the special development effect can be selected may be executed only when a big hit is achieved. At that time, it is determined that the jackpot display result will be obtained when the special development effect is executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the development effect pattern selection table used for selecting and determining the effect pattern of the meter effect development effect will be described. FIG. 22-5 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern selection table in a table format. The development effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

The development effect pattern selection table includes a development effect pattern selection table when the third special reach time special development effect cannot be selected in FIG. 22-5(A) and a third special reach time special development time in FIG. 22-5(B). Development selectable development effect pattern selection table, fourth special reach time special development effect non-selectable development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5(C), and fourth special reach of FIG. 22-5(D) The time special development effect selectable time evolution effect pattern selection table is included.

The third special reach time special development effect unselectable time development effect pattern selection table is used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected in the third special reach special development effect selection table. The third special reach time special development effect selectable time development effect pattern selection table is used when the special development effect is selectable in the third special reach special development effect selection table.

The fourth special reach time special development effect non-selectable development effect pattern selection table is used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table. The fourth special reach time special development effect selectable time development effect pattern selection table is used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table.

In the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5(A) to (D), a random number SR3 (numeric value range of 0 to 59) for development effect pattern selection determination as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. 60 numerical values in total are allocated to a plurality of types of development effect patterns. For SR3, the number of assigned random number SR3 values is shown for the sake of clarity. In each of the development effect patterns, a combination of the self-powered continuous hit effect pattern to be executed when the self-powered continuous hit is performed and the automatic continuous hit effect pattern to be executed when the auto-striked is performed is set. A combination is selected.

First, the table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (A) in which the special development effect is not selectable, the self-powered continuous hit effect pattern in which the meter level reaches the maximum L5 by continuous hits and shifts to the first advanced effect, and the meter level is hit continuously. The production pattern A1 which is a combination of the automatic continuous production performance patterns which becomes the maximum L5 and shifts to the first development production, the self-powered continuous production production pattern which the maximum meter level becomes L10 and shifts to the second development production, and the meter level. With respect to the effect pattern A2 which is a combination of the automatic continuous hit effect patterns in which a maximum of L5 is achieved by continuous hits and the first development effect is shifted, the data is set to have a magnitude relationship of “A1>A2”.

In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (B) in which special development effects can be selected, effect patterns B1 in which effect patterns similar to effect pattern A1 are set and effect patterns similar to effect pattern A2 are set. Performance pattern B2, and performance pattern B in which the meter level automatically reaches MAX after maximum hits of L10 and automatically shifts to special development performance
For 3, the data is set to have a magnitude relation of “B1>B2>B3”.

Next, the table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table in FIG. 22-5(C) in which special development effects cannot be selected, there are effect patterns C1 in which effect patterns similar to effect pattern A1 are set, and effect patterns similar to effect pattern A2. Regarding the set effect pattern C2, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "C1<C2", which is the reverse of the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5(A).

In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (D) in which special development effects can be selected, effect patterns D1 and effect patterns A2 and B2 similar to effect patterns A1 and B1 are set. For the effect pattern D2 in which is set and the effect pattern D3 in which the same effect pattern as the effect pattern B3 is set, contrary to the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5(B), “D1<D2<D3 The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "."

22-5(A) to (D) in the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5(A) to (D), when the special development effect is not selectable for the third super reach, the meter level is maximum from L5 to the first level. When the meter level is set to be higher than the rate at which the meter level shifts from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum, and the special development effect can be selected, the data is set to have the opposite ratio relationship. It is set.

In addition, in the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5(A) to (D), in the case of self-striking, for the fourth super reach, when the special development effect cannot be selected, the meter level is set to the maximum from L5. When the rate of shifting to the first development effect is set to be lower than the rate at which the meter level shifts from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum, and the special development effect can be selected, the opposite ratio relationship is achieved. The data is set.

Then, in the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5(A) to (D), in the case of self-hit, when the special development effect is selectable, the fourth super reach is more advantageous than the third super reach. The data is set so that the rate of transition from the meter level MAX to the special development effect is high. And, the expectation that the fourth super reach is a big hit is higher than that of the third super reach.

With such a setting, in the case of self-beating, the degree of expectation of a big hit is set in a relationship of "first development effect<second development effect<special development effect", so the level of the meter value increases. Accordingly, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In the case of automatic continuous hit, in the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5(A) to (D), when the special development effect cannot be selected for each of the third super reach and the fourth super reach, the meter level is selected. The data is set so that, when only the effect that shifts from L5 to the first development effect is selected and the special development effect can be selected, the effect that shifts from the meter level MAX to the special development effect can be selected.

With such a setting, in the case of automatic continuous hits, the degree of expectation of a big hit is set to have a relationship of "first development effect <special development effect", so that as the level of the meter value rises, the player You can increase your expectations for the big hit. When the automatic continuous hit is performed, the meter level is less likely to increase than when the automatic continuous hit is performed, but the automatic shift is performed by enabling the effect of shifting from the meter level MAX to the special development effect at a predetermined rate. It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

FIG. 22-6 is a flow chart showing a continuous hit effect setting process. The continuous hit effect setting process is a process executed within the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process.

In the continuous hit effect setting process, the third super reach is specified for the variable display executed this time by confirming the variation pattern command received at the start of the current variable display based on the data in the command receiving buffer. It is determined whether or not (261FS001). This is because, in the present embodiment, the meter effect is executed in the variation pattern of the third super reach and the fourth super reach as described above.

When the third super reach is specified for the variable display this time, the data of the random number SR2 for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the third special reach special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(A) is displayed. It is used to selectively determine whether or not the special development effect can be selected (261FS002).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in 261FS002 (261FS003). When it is determined by the confirmation in 261FS003 that the special development effect cannot be selected, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special special time at the third special reach in FIG. 22-5(A) is extracted. When the development effect cannot be selected, the development effect pattern selection table is used to select and determine the effect pattern for the continuous hit effect of self-powered continuous hit and automatic continuous hit (261FS004), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. Data for setting the timing of the effective operation period is also included in the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect of self-powered continuous hit and automatic continuous hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the confirmation in 261FS003 that the special development effect can be selected, the data of the random number SR3 for the development effect pattern selection determination is extracted, and at the time of the third special reach of FIG. 22-5(B). The special development effect selectable development effect pattern selection table is used to select and determine the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect of the self-powered continuous hit and the automatic continuous hit (261FS005), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

When the current change is not the third super reach by 261FS001 described above, it is determined whether or not the fourth super reach is designated for the variable display executed this time (261FS006).

When the third super reach is designated for the variable display this time, the data of the random number SR2 for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the fourth special reach time special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4(B) is displayed. It is used to selectively determine whether the special development effect is selectable or not (261FS006).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in 261FS006 (261FS008). When it is determined by the confirmation in 261FS008 that the special development effect cannot be selected, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special special reach time special in FIG. 22-5(C) is extracted. When the development effect cannot be selected, the development effect pattern selection table is used to select and determine the effect pattern for the continuous hit effect of the self-powered continuous hit and the automatic continuous hit (261FS009), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. On the other hand, when it is determined by the confirmation in 261FS008 that the special development effect can be selected, the data of the random number SR3 for the development effect pattern selection determination is extracted, and at the time of the fourth special reach of FIG. 22-5(D). The special development effect selectable development effect pattern selection table is used to select and determine the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect of self-powered continuous hit and automatic continuous hit (261FS010), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

When the current change is not the fourth super reach by 261FS006 described above, it is determined whether or not the second super reach is designated for the variable display executed this time (261FS011).

When the second super reach is specified for the variable display this time, it is determined to execute a plural specific image display effect pattern described later with reference to FIG. 22-9 (261FS012). Then, by setting the data for executing the determined plural specific image display effect pattern, the plural specific image display effect pattern is set (261F014), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the first super reach is designated, the effect is set in a setting process other than the continuous hit effect setting process, and thus the process ends.

In 261FS013, based on the determination of the effect pattern in 261FS004, 261FS005, 261FS009, 261FS010, by setting the data for executing the determined effect pattern, the continuous hit effect pattern is set (261F013), and the process ends. .. As described above, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in the continuous hit effect processing, the continuous hit effect with the set effect pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 22-1, for example.

FIG. 22-7 is a flow chart showing a continuous hit effect process. The continuous hit effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172) in the effect control process process.

In the continuous stroke effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the valid period in the effect pattern set in the continuous stroke effect setting process of FIG. 22-1 (261FS021). Whether or not it is during the operation effective period is set in the effect pattern set in the continuous hit effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Check based on whether or not it is applicable during the operation valid period.

When the operation is not valid in 261FS021, the process ends. On the other hand, during the operation valid period in 261FS021, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B is operated based on whether or not the detection signal is input from the push sensor 35B (261FS022). If the push button 31B is not operated, the process ends. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is operated, it is determined whether or not a long-press operation in which the push button 31B is continuously operated is executed (261FS023).

When the long press operation is not executed in 261FS023, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of continuous hitting with the self set in 261FS013 of the continuous hit effect setting process is executed (261FS026). , 261FS027. Thereby, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in 261FS013 of the hit effect setting process, if the automatic hit effect is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the automatic hit effect of the set effect pattern is set. The meter effect in the pattern is executed.

On the other hand, when the long press operation is being executed in 261FS023, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition such that the long press operation continuation period is 1 second or longer is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (261FS024). If the automatic continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, when the automatic continuous hit execution condition is satisfied, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of automatic continuous hit set in 261FS013 of the continuous hit effect setting process is executed (261FS025), and the process proceeds to 261FS027. As a result, when the effect pattern of the consecutive hit effect is set in 261FS013 of the consecutive hit effect setting process, when the automatic consecutive hit is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the automatic consecutive hit effect of the set effect patterns is set. The meter effect in the pattern is executed.

In 261FS025, the predetermined time interval at which it is determined that the automatic repeated hits are considered to be repeated is longer than the time interval at which the 261FS026 determines that the automatic repeated hits are performed (see FIG. 22-2). As a result, the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the automatic repeated hits is controlled to be slower than the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the continuous hits by the player.

In 261FS027, for example, it is determined whether or not it is the time for the production development condition to be satisfied in the self-powered continuous production effect pattern or the automatic continuous hit production pattern set in 261FS013 of the continuous stroke effect setting process (261FS027). In this case, when the effect development condition is satisfied, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is the development timing of the self-powered continuous hit effect pattern or the automatic continuous hit effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the hit effect setting process. That is, the meter display has reached the meter level required for performance development in the self-powered continuous hit production pattern or the automatic continuous hit production pattern set in 261FS013 of the hit production setting process.

If it is not time for the performance development conditions to be established in 261FS027, the process ends. On the other hand, when the production development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, the level of the meter display of the current meter image 261F001 is the level required when shifting to the development production in the production pattern currently being executed (first development production transition). It is determined whether or not the level of the meter display for performing the development effect is insufficient by checking whether or not the level has reached L5 at the time, and the level L10 at the time of transition to the second development effect (261FS028). ).

If the level of the meter display is not insufficient in 261FS028, the process proceeds to 261FS010 described later. On the other hand, when the level of the meter display is not insufficient in 261FS028, the meter display adjustment effect is executed (261FS029), and the process proceeds to 261FS010. The meter display adjustment effect changes the meter display up to level L5 when shifting to the first development effect, and changes the meter display up to level L10 when changing to the second development effect, as a display that compensates for the insufficient level of the above-mentioned meter display. This is a performance to adjust the level. As a result, when shifting to the development effect, the effect shifts after reaching the maximum level of the meter display determined corresponding to each development effect. Then, an effect that develops into an effect that is predetermined and set in the effect pattern that is currently being executed is executed (261FS030). Thereby, the transition to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect as shown in FIG. 22-1 is performed. Then, the process ends.

<Examples of meter display adjustment effects according to actions different from repeated hits>
Next, in the case of executing the meter display adjustment effect in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7, an effect that finally causes the meter display to reach a specific level (level L5, level L10, etc.) of the meter level corresponding to the type of development effect Based on the fact that when the effect mode of the meter display has not reached the specific stage before execution of, the specific operation different from the continuous hit of the push button 31B by the player, such as the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, is detected. An example will be described in which an effect capable of changing the effect mode of the meter display can be executed with a change degree higher than the change degree of the effect mode of the meter display according to the continuous hit by the player.

FIG. 22-8 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example in which the meter display adjustment effect is performed based on the player performing a specific operation different from repeated hits. FIG. 22-8 is in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 31A when, for example, the effect pattern B3 (meter level L10→MAX+special development effect) of the effect patterns of the meter effect shown in FIG. 22-5 is executed. FIG. 11 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example in which the meter display adjustment effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-8(A), when the production development condition of the production pattern B3 is satisfied, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 is insufficient as compared with the level L10 which is predetermined as the meter level before the development to the special development production ( Level L5). In such a case, as in 261FS030 of FIG. 22-7, a meter display adjustment effect for adjusting the meter level to the level L10 is executed. As another example of the meter display adjustment effect, as shown in FIGS. 22-8B and 22C, the stick controller 31A as the operation detecting means that can perform a specific operation different from the push button 31B that is the object of continuous hitting is operated. When the operation (action) of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, the meter display adjustment effect may be executed to adjust the meter level to the level L10.

As shown in FIG. 22-8(B), the meter display adjustment effect is started and the stick controller image 261F003 simulating the stick controller 31A is displayed on condition that the meter display is insufficient when the effect development condition is satisfied. As a result, a suggestion effect suggesting an operation (action) of the stick controller 31A by the player is executed. Then, when the operation (motion) of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected within the period in which such suggestive effect is being executed, the meter of the meter image 261F001 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-8(C). The meter display is adjusted so that the display is increased to the level L10 which is set as the level at which the development effect in this example is shifted.

In the example of FIG. 22-8, the stick controller 31A has been described as the operation detecting means capable of performing a specific operation that is a condition for executing the meter display adjustment effect, but the invention is not limited to this, and a rotary jog controller or the like may be used. Any operation detecting means may be used as long as it is an operation detecting means capable of performing a specific operation different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit.

Further, when the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the operation detection of the operation detection means capable of performing a specific operation different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit, the meter display is performed in a plurality of steps by one operation (operation) detection. May be increased, or the level of the meter display may be increased so as to eliminate the insufficient level at once by detecting one operation (operation).

As shown in FIG. 22-8, when a specific condition that the meter display is insufficient when the production development condition is satisfied, in the meter production, a production mode such as finally displaying the meter value of the meter display. Even when the level of the meter display changes too much when performing the meter display adjustment effect that causes the player to reach a specific step, the meter display effect based on the detection of a specific action different from the continuous hit by the player By the effect of changing the mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the effect of changing the effect mode of the meter display to feel uncomfortable.

[Description of Characteristic Section 262F]
Next, the characteristic part 262F will be described. As the characteristic part 262F, in order to promote the motion of the player, the motion of the player is detected with respect to a plurality of specific images that can suggest that the motion of the player can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period. Based on this, a description will be given of a multiple specific image display effect in which the number of specific images displayed is increased according to the elapse of the detection valid period when one specific image can be erased.

FIG. 22-9 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of a plurality of specific image display effects. FIG. 22-9 shows the effect of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the special design, but the image showing the variable display of the decorative design is omitted from the viewpoint of preventing complication of the drawing. ing.
As described above, the multiple-specific image display effect is an effect executed by setting an effect pattern in 261FS011 and 261FS014 of FIG. 22-6, for example. The multiple specific image display effect is executed during variable display based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 22-9(A), the plural specific image display effect is executed after the SP reach notification image 261F0005 is displayed at the start of the SP reach (super reach) to notify that the SP reach is executed. To be done.

In the multiple specific image display effect, as shown in FIG. 22-9(A), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the bottom of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-9(B), a specific button image 261F010, which is an image simulating the push button 31B, is displayed from the specific display area such as the central portion in the display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the plurality of specific button images 261F010 are sequentially displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (B) to (E), the display is moved radially from the central portion toward the outer side and displayed. It is executed in a directing manner. As a result, the number of displayed specific button images 261F010 is increased as the operation valid period elapses.

When a plurality of specific image display effects are executed, a button image 261F002 including an image simulating the push button 31B and a character image of “continuous hit!” and an operation are provided in a corner portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The valid period image 261F004 is displayed. The display of such a button image 261F002 and the display of a plurality of specific button images 261F010 which are displayed in an increased manner facilitates the player's operation of operating (continuously hitting) the push button 31B. Then, by displaying the plurality of specific button images 261F010, it is possible to suggest that the player's motion can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period.

By the player's operation, an operation such as self-striking and auto-striking is executed on the push button 31B, and when the operation is detected, the detection is performed as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (D) and (E). Accordingly, an effect in which one button image 261F010 of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 is deleted in a predetermined order is executed. When the specific button image 261F010 is displayed, an effect image 261F008 and a number (“10”) as a predetermined image that makes it possible to specify that the specific button image 261F010 has been deleted in the vicinity of the deleted specific button image 261F010. The image 261F009 is displayed. The numerical image 261F009 is also an image that suggests an increase in the level of the meter display by indicating the number of points at which the level of the meter display of “10” is increased by one step.

The specific button image 261F010 that has not been erased by such a player's operation is moved to the end of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 22-9(D) and (E). The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the edge of the display area is erased in such a manner that it goes out of the display area. In this way, the image erased in such a manner as to go out of the display area is excluded from the erase target corresponding to the operation of the push button 31 by the player, thereby invalidating the motion detection of the player. Will be the target.

It should be noted that the specific button image 261F010 may be configured such that one image is erased by operation detection of one operation by the player's operation, and a plurality of times (for example, two to three times) by the player's operation. One image may be deleted each time the operation is detected. In addition, a plurality of images (for example, two to three images) may be deleted by the operation detection of one operation by the player's operation.

The data setting for executing such a plurality of specific image display effects is performed in the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. Then, the multiple specific image display effect during variable display is performed in the variable display effect process (S172).

By executing such a plurality of specific image display effects, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) In order to promote the movement of the player, a plurality of specific button images 261F010 that can suggest that the movement of the player can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period are pushed by the movement of the player 31B. When it is possible to delete one specific image based on the detection of the operation of, the display number of the specific button image 261F010 is increased according to the elapse of the operation valid period, thereby improving the fun of the effect. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) The plurality of specific button images 261F010 are moved and displayed after appearing and displayed, so that the player can be given a visual impact by using the specific images.

(3) The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the outside of the display area of the image display device 5 is erased and the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is invalidated, so that the specific button image 261F010 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to prevent the display number of the specific button image 261F010 from becoming excessive.

(4) In the vicinity of the specific button image 261F010 erased in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation, the effect image 261F008 and the number (( By displaying the “10”) image 261F009, the player can recognize which specific button image 261F010 has been deleted.

(5) In the image display device 5, the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 is started from the specific display area such as the central portion of the display area, so that the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 becomes regular. Thus, the effect of displaying the plurality of specific button images 261F010 can be prevented from being an effect that lacks cohesion.

[Description of Characteristic Section 263F]
Next, the characteristic part 263F will be described. As the characteristic part 263F, when the operation valid period is displayed during the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, when the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is not detected, the effect In the first period like the first term, the meter effect is executed assuming that the motion of the player is detected after the operation valid period has elapsed, but in the second period like the latter term of the effect, the meter effect is executed. The effect of performing control in which is limited will be described.

FIG. 22-10 is a production effect that is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected within the operation effective period between the first period and the second period of the effect period during the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing the effect control for each period for executing.

In FIG. 22-10, (A) and (B) show effects executed in the first period which is the first period in the effect period, and (C) to (G) in the second period in the effect period. The production performed in a certain latter period is shown. Such effect control for each period may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the characteristic section 261F or may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the characteristic section 262F.

As an effect to be executed in the previous period in the effect by period, as shown in FIGS. 22-10(A) and (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous period character image 261F006 is displayed. Then, when the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is detected in accordance with the operation promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is determined according to the detection determination. An increasing meter effect is executed.

As an effect to be executed in the previous period in the effect by period, as shown in FIGS. 22-10(A) and (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous period character image 261F006 is displayed. Then, when the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is detected according to the motion promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is determined according to the detection determination. The increasing first meter effect is executed.

In the second meter effect executed in the previous period in the effect by period, similarly to the effect shown in FIG. 22-1, the meter image 261F001 is displayed on the left side of the screen in a portrait format, and the previous term character image 261F007 is displayed. When the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation is detected in accordance with the operation promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 increases according to the detection determination. Meter effect is executed.

In the second meter effect, as in the effect shown in FIG. 22-1, it is possible to shift to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect in accordance with the level of the meter value. However, in the second meter effect, the level of the meter value does not automatically change to the level of the predetermined meter value when the effect development condition is satisfied, and the second meter effect depends on the level of the meter value at the end of the operation effective period. It is possible to shift to the first development performance, the second development performance, or the special development performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22-10(D), if the meter value is at least the level L5 and less than the level L10 at the end of the operation valid period, the effect of shifting to the first development effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 22-10(E), if the meter value is the level L10 at the end of the operation valid period, the effect of shifting to the second development effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 22-10(F), if the meter value is at level MAX at the end of the operation valid period, the effect of shifting to the special development effect is executed. However, since the effect by period is selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns as described later, even if the player continuously hits at high speed, the meter value may reach the level L10 but may not reach the level MAX. The effect control that occurs is performed.

Further, when the operation of the push button 31B due to the operation of the player is not detected at the end of the operation valid period, control for shifting to a special effect different from the development effect is performed as shown in FIG. 22-10(G). Be done. The special effect is, for example, the effect of the big hit is not suggested, and the interesting effect of the effect is hardly felt.

Next, a data table used in the effect control for each period will be described. First, in the effect control for each period, a special development effect selection table similar to that of FIG. 22-4 is used to selectively determine whether or not the special development effect can be selected.

FIG. 22-11 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an effect pattern selection table used in the latter half of the effect control for each period. The effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

The production pattern selection table includes a production pattern selection table when the third special reach time special development production cannot be selected in FIG. 22-11(A) and a third special reach special development production selection in FIG. 22-11(B). Possible production pattern selection table, fourth special reach special development production in FIG. 22-11(C) non-selectable production pattern selection table, and fourth special reach special development production in FIG. 22-11(D) A selectable production pattern selection table is included.

The production pattern selection table when the third special reach special development production cannot be selected is when the special development production is not selectable in the third special reach special development production selection table of FIG. 22-4(A). Used. The third special reach time special development effect selectable effect pattern selection table is used when the special development effect is determined to be selectable in the third special reach special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4.

The special pattern at the time of special selection for special development at the time of the fourth special reach is the production pattern selection table when the special development at the time of the special development production selection table at the time of the fourth special reach of FIG. Used. The fourth special reach time special development effect selectable effect pattern selection table is used when the special development effect is selectable in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table.

In the effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-11A to 22D, the random number SR4 (0 to 119) for determining the later effect pattern selection in the effect by period as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. 120 numerical values in total) are allocated to a plurality of types of late stage effect patterns. For SR4, the number of allocated random number SR4 values is shown for clarity of explanation. In each effect pattern, the same effect pattern is set when the player repeatedly hits himself and when the player continuously hits automatically, and such an effect pattern is selected.

First, the table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11(A) used when it is determined that the special development effect is not selectable, the meter level is set to the minimum L0 to the maximum L10 by repeated hits, and the meter at the end of the effective operation period According to the value, only the effect pattern a that can be shifted to the special effect, the first development effect, or the second development effect is selected. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11(B) used when it is determined that the special development effect is selectable, the effect pattern b1 that is the same as the effect pattern a and the minimum meter level L0 by the continuous stroke. The maximum value is L10, and one of the special effect, the first development effect, the second development effect, or the effect pattern b2 capable of shifting to the special effect effect is selected according to the meter value at the end of the operation valid period. It For the effect pattern b1 and the effect pattern b2, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “b1>b2”.

Next, the table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11(C) used when it is determined that the special development effect is not selectable, only the effect pattern c that is the same as the effect pattern a is selected. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11(D) used when it is determined that the special development effect is selectable, the effect pattern c1 that is the same as the effect pattern b1 and the effect pattern c2 that is the same as the effect pattern b2. Is selected. As for the effect pattern c1 and the effect pattern c2, the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “c1<c2”. And, the expectation that the fourth super reach is a big hit is higher than that of the third super reach.

With such a setting, the degree of expectation of a big hit is set to have a relationship of "first development effect, second development effect <special development effect", so that as the level of the meter value increases, the player's You can increase the expectation of a big hit.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 22-11 is set in the continuous hit effect setting process of selectively determining and setting the effect pattern to be executed by the same process as that of FIG. 22-6 executed in the variable display start setting process of S171. To be done.

FIG. 22-12 is a flowchart showing the second consecutive stroke effect process. The second continuous stroke effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172) in the effect control process process, and is a process of executing an effect in a later effect pattern in the effect by period. In the variable display effect production process (S172), the production in the production pattern of the previous term in the production by period is executed by the first consecutive production production process, and the production in the production pattern of the previous period in the production by period is performed in the second production production. It is executed by processing.

In the second continuous stroke effect process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the late stage effect pattern in the effect for each period set in the continuous stroke effect setting process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171. (261FS031). Whether or not it is during the operation effective period is set in the effect pattern set in the continuous hit effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Check based on whether or not it is applicable during the operation valid period.

If the operation is not valid in 261FS031, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation is valid in 261FS031, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B is operated based on whether or not the detection signal is input from the push sensor 35B (261FS032). If the push button 31B is not operated, the process ends. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is operated, it is determined whether or not a long-press operation in which the push button 31B is continuously operated is executed (261FS033).

When the long press operation is not executed in 261FS033, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of continuous self-powered stroke set in the continuous stroke effect setting process is executed (261FS036), and 261FS037. Proceed to. As a result, when the self-powered continuous striking is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the meter effect in the self-powered continuous striking effect pattern is executed.

On the other hand, when the long press operation is being executed in 261FS033, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition is satisfied such that the long press operation continuation period is, for example, 1 second or more. It is determined whether or not (261FS034). If the automatic continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, when the automatic continuous hit execution condition is satisfied, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of automatic continuous hit is executed (261FS035), and the process proceeds to 261FS037. As a result, when automatic continuous hitting is executed within the operation valid period during variable display, meter effect in the automatic continuous hit effect pattern is executed.

In 261FS035, the predetermined time interval at which it is determined that automatic continuous hits are considered to be repeated is longer than the time interval at 261FS036 at which it is determined that automatic repeated hits are performed (see FIG. 22-2). As a result, the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the automatic repeated hits is controlled to be slower than the changing speed of the display level of the meter value according to the continuous hits by the player.

In 261FS037, for example, it is determined whether it is the end of the operation valid period (261FS037). If it is not the end of the operation valid period, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is the end of the operation valid period, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the production development condition for the first development production, the second development production, or the special development production is established (261FS038). In this case, when the production development condition is satisfied, the level of the meter value is L5 to L9, the level of the meter value is L10, and the level of the meter value is MAX. That is.

When it is not the time for the production development condition to be satisfied in 261FS027, it is determined whether or not no operation has been detected during the operation valid period (261FS040). When the operation is detected once or more during the operation valid period, the processing is ended. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, a process for shifting to the special effect is executed (S261FS041), and the process is ended.

By executing the control described above, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) As shown in FIG. 22-10, when the operation valid period is displayed but the operation by the player's action is not detected, in the first half of the production by period, the player's operation is performed after the operation detection valid period has elapsed. It is considered that the operation by the action is detected and the meter effect is executed, but in the latter half of the effect by period, the execution of the meter effect is limited, so that the suggestive effect is diverse, so the effect of the effect is interesting. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by improving.

(2) Based on the detected operation amount by the player's operation, the development effect is executed according to the level of the meter value as shown in (D) to (F) of FIG. 22-10. Since the effect contents change by shifting from the effect of No. 1 to any one of a plurality of types of development effects, it is possible to encourage the player to perform an action.

(3) As shown in (G) of FIG. 22-10, when the operation by the player's action is not detected in the latter half of the effect by period, the effect is changed from the effect being executed to the special effect, thereby playing the game. If the player does not operate, the player can be made aware that the special effect will be performed.

(4) Next, in S261FS035 and S261FS036 of FIG. 22-12, when it is determined that the repeated hits have been executed based on the automatic repeated hit determination, it is longer than when the player's own repeated hits are detected. Since it is considered that the player repeatedly hits at the detection interval, it is possible to encourage the player who pays attention to the progress of the production such as the transition of the production to perform the continuous hit by himself/herself.

[Modifications Regarding Characteristic Parts 261F to 263F]
(1) When the meter effects shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are displayed. When reaching each level of the meter value that is the transition condition to the development effect, a special motion display is displayed on the character image displayed at that time. You may perform the production|generation which notifies that it arrived. In that case, the higher the level of the meter value that is the condition for transition to the development effect, the more the appearance of the character image may be noticeable.

(2) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are displayed. When each of the levels of the meter value that is the transition condition to the development effect is reached, a different character image is newly displayed for each level of the meter value that is the transition condition and the character image is changed. You may perform the effect which alert|reports that the level of the meter used as a transition condition was reached. In that case, every time the level of the meter value that is the transition condition to the development effect is reached, a character image that is newly displayed when the level of the meter value that is the transition condition to the next development effect is reached is suggested. The display may be executed.

(3) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are displayed. When each of the levels of the meter value which is the transition condition to the development effect is reached, the display level of the meter image 261F001 is changed to a special color and the level of the meter which is the transition condition to the development effect is reached. You may perform the production|generation which notifies by changing a production mode. In this case, the higher the level of the meter value that is the condition for transition to the development effect, the more visually noticeable the appearance mode may be.

(4) As the above-described meter effect, an example has been shown in which the level of the meter value changes by one level in the meter image 261F001 meter display image when one operation by the player's action is detected. However, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of levels may be changed when one operation is detected. Further, as the above-mentioned meter effect, one level may be changed when a plurality of operations (for example, 2 to 3 times) are detected.

(5) The above-described meter effect may be executed during a part of the operation valid period of the operation valid period set for the variation display in the specific variation pattern, and the variation in the specific variation pattern may be performed. It may be executed during the entire operation valid period of the operation valid period set to display.

(6) Although the operation valid period is displayed in the meter display format like the operation valid period image 261F004, the operation valid period may be displayed as a numerical image.

(7) The transition to the first development production, the transition to the second development production, and the transition to the special development production by the meter production based on the operation detection by the operation of the player within the operation valid period as described above. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executable when a self-pulsing operation is detected for almost the entire operation valid period, and self-responding for a part of the operation valid period (for example, 50% period). It may be made executable when an operation is detected.

(8) The transition to the first development production, the transition to the second development production, and the transition to the special development production by the meter production based on the operation detection by the operation of the player within the operation valid period as described above. Alternatively, the automatic continuous hitting operation may be executed when the automatic continuous hitting operation is detected for almost the entire operation valid term, and the automatic continuous hitting operation may be performed for a part of the operation valid term (for example, a period of 50%). It may be made executable when an operation is detected.

It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 31B push button, 35B push sensor, 261F001 meter image, 5 image display device, 120 effect control CPU, 261F010 specific button image, 261F008 effect image, 261F009 number image.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing,
A detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player,
A specific display means for displaying a specific display,
Based on the fact that the detection means detects a predetermined movement of the player different from the continuous movement of the player during the detection effective period of the detection means, a continuous movement determination judgment that determines that the continuous movement is executed at predetermined intervals is made. Motion determining means for
Based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means during the detection effective period, it is possible to execute a specific production capable of changing the production mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous movement. It includes a Do specific effect execution means, and
Further, the specific effect executing means can change the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages in accordance with the continuous operation at the predetermined interval, based on the determination that the operation determining means determines the continuous operation. It is possible to execute a specific production,
The specific effect executing means,
Is maximum can vary up to a predetermined stage is shorter than the predetermined distance determination considers the continuous operation the particular display representation embodiment when performing the specific effect on the basis that is the determination deemed pre Symbol continuous operation When performing the specific effect based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means at intervals, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to a maximum specific step higher than the predetermined step,
It is possible to change the presentation mode of the specific display to a special stage different from the specific stage based on the establishment of a special condition,
When it is predetermined to execute an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage as the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific display is based on the determination of the continuous motion. After changing to a predetermined stage, the detection means detects a continuous movement of the player, and the detection means does not detect a continuous movement of the player. Reachable,
When the effect of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage within the detection effective period, the effect of the specific display can be expanded to a first effect mode, and the effect of the specific display during the effective detection period. When the particular stage is reached, the performance mode can be developed into the second performance mode,
When a specific condition is satisfied, in the specific effect, an effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage is executed,
When the specific condition is satisfied, before execution of the effect that finally brings the effect mode of the specific display to the specific stage, when the effect mode of the specific display does not reach the specific step , Based on the detection of a specific motion different from the player's continuous motion, the effect mode of the specific display is changed with a change degree higher than the change degree of the effect mode of the specific display according to the player's continuous motion A gaming machine that can execute the effects .